Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.Introduction In this tutorial. 1 . Finally. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. electrical. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. Germany. and piping. such as mechanical equipment. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and plumbing engineering workflows. and plumbing fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. 3 . What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. such as duct. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. electrical panels.

the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. On the Contents tab. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. When you open a training file. After completing each exercise. and sheets to document the project. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. You do not design entire systems. annotations. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Create detail views. NOTE Depending on your installation. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Metric file names have an _m suffix. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. However. When you install the training files as instructed. and tags. to provide a richer and more finished design. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. So. For example. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. Contact your CAD manager for more information. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . such as templates and families. For example. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. is located and accessed in the training files location. you can choose to save your work. as well as how to open and save them. your Training folder may be in a different location. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. templates. when you add ductwork. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. you learn where the training files are located. In this exercise. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. Create schedules. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. views. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. however. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning.

Accessing Training Files | 5 . if you open settings. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. scroll down. click ➤ Save As. For example. 4 Click the training file name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. double-click Imperial or Metric. You may close the file with or without saving changes. and click Save. verify that Project Files (*. For Files of type. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. and you can open any supported file type.rvt.rvt and make changes. and click the Training Files icon.rvt) is selected. you are prompted to save the changes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 3 In the right pane. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. the Open dialog displays. 8 If you have made changes. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. For File name. enter the new file name. a list of file types displays. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. select the folder in which to save the new file. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. and click Open.

6 .

drawings. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. As you work in drawing and schedule views. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and plans. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the hierarchy of elements. the operation of the software is parametric. 2D and 3D view. In this case. In this case. drawing sheets. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and phases when you need it. sections. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. ■ ■ 7 .Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. In the Revit MEP model. schedules. the floor or roof remains connected. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. the door retains this relationship to the partition. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and schedules required for a building project. the parameter is one of association or connection. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. You learn the terminology. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. hence. quantities. every drawing sheet. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. scope. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. If the length of the elevation is changed. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. If you move the partition.

For example. tags. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. dimensions. and 2D detail components. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. and electrical panels. ducts. walls and ceilings are hosts. sinks. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. tags. boilers. sprinklers. They help to describe or document the design. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The second is its approach to propagating building changes. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Examples include detail lines. For example. and electrical panels.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. grids. boilers. ducts. sinks. Datum elements help to define project context. For example. and reference planes are datum elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. levels. For example. dimensions. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. When you change something. and keynotes are annotation elements. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. sprinklers. filled regions. They display in relevant views of the design.

you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. North . and ceilings. schedules. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. first floor. and drawings of the design. If you can draw. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. views of the project. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. top of wall. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. The project file contains all information for the building design. families. you do nothing to establish these relationships. To place levels. you can explicitly control them. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Most often. such as roofs.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. However. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. In other cases. section views. and so forth). floors. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. For example.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. and types. programming is not required. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. for example. you must be in a section or elevation view. By using a single project file. Often. Project: In Revit MEP. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. from geometry to construction data. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. elevation views. In Revit MEP. or bottom of foundation. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. This information includes components used to design the model.

a lighting fixture could be considered one family. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. System families include ducts. System families can be transferred between projects. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. hiding. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. showing. A type can be a specific size of a family. For example.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. For example. pipes. Type: Each family can have several types. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can also display several project views at one time. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. With a few clicks. Then experiment with them. identical use. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Unlike system and standard component families. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). such as a 30” X 42” title block. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. and similar graphical representation. A type can also be a style. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. each in-place family contains only a single type. However. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. or layer the views to see only the one on top. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. For example. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. and wires. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family.

or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. To return the panel to the ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop.

tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools used for editing existing elements.. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. architect-specific tools. and settings. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. data and systems. select the tool first. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . project and system parameters. and for switching views.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.. When working on the Modify tab. and CAD files. tools used for managing and modifying the current view.

For example. To keep a panel expanded. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. displays frequently used tools. By default. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. provides access to common tools. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. closes the application menu (double-click). when adding duct. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. provides requested information.

click.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Export) On the application menu. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing.. (Open) save the current drawing. (Save As) export the current drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. such as Export and Publish.. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. select a file to open.

or template file..On the application menu. or template file.. (Licensing) close the file.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Print) access product and license information. (Publish) print the current drawing. family. saves a current project. annotation. to.. click. family. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. annotation. To enable or disable a tool item. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. provides views including Default 3D. but is not enabled by default. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. Camera. and Walkthrough. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. publish the current project.

Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. In addition. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. When you are highlighting an element or component. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. To show the Status Bar again. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. check the Status Bar. or the Family Editor. When you are using a command. Group. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Modify. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. workshared components. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. Starting with the most recent command. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. This displays the command history in a list. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Clipboard.To undo or redo a series of operations. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. To hide the Status Bar. Clear the Status Bar check mark. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . repeat the command. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. when you switch to another editing mode. However. displaying the same information. a tool tip appears next to the cursor.

It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. To change existing elements to a different type. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . select one or more elements of the same category. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Place a Wall. for example. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. On the Quick Access toolbar. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. When you place an element in a drawing.To cancel or exit the current command. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. click (Modify).

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 1 Click ➤ Open. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. click Training Files. After you are familiar with these tasks. For example.rvt. In the following steps. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. There are several ways to access zoom options. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.

NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. the view zooms in on the selected area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. To modify or add snap increments. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. When you release the mouse button. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 6 Click in the drawing area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Modifying the View | 19 . In the drawing area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. If you do not have a wheel mouse. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. click . this is referred to as a crossing selection. on the Navigation bar. 9 To display SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design.

10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. For more information about SteeringWheels. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. Click and drag to orbit the design. 14 To exit the wheel. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. ➤ Options. moving the wheel to the desired location. To define settings for SteeringWheels. press ESC. and click tin the Options dialog. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. click the SteeringWheels tab. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. As you move the mouse. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. and then using the Zoom tool again. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.

HVAC Plan . and select the duct. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. called drag controls. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. After you are familiar with these tasks. display along the ends. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Similar controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. as shown. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. These are the drag controls. and open Level 2 . Small blue dots. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . referred to as shape handles. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. bottoms.Design. 2 Enter ZR. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When drawing or modifying an MEP design.

click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. click the Undo command. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. or press CTRL+Z. select the first item in the list. on the Standard toolbar. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps.3 Click and drag the bottom control. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 On the Undo menu. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move. In this example. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is.

as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. In this case. for example. and click again to specify the ending position. Some commands.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 10 Move the cursor to the right. and drag it to the left as shown. such as Move and Copy. click to specify the starting position. you want to move the duct. After selecting the element to move. The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. require 2 clicks to complete the command. 11 With the duct already selected. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .

12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .End a command Some commands. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command.Supply. Click OK. 14 Enter VG.Return. such as the Modify Ducts command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Select Mechanical . you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. For example. Press ESC twice. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 13 To end a command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and click Open. create and manage views. You can choose from several templates. In that case. 5 In the New Project dialog. You can either select a template from the template library. select Project. link files. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. 27 . you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. use copy/monitor. the default building levels and standard views. 2 In the New Project dialog. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. and modify system settings. under Create new. system families. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. such as ducts and pipes. New projects inherit all the families. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. under Template file. such as the default project units and settings. 6 Click OK. click Browse.rte template. such as coordination review and interference checking. and geometry from the starting template. Finally. settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and loadable families.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. click Training files. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default.

If you want to use a template other than the default. select School or University. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. click Edit. for Energy Data. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. NH. 8 In the drawing area. For example. click Browse. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. In the Choose Template dialog. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you can select it now. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). select Manchester. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Click Cancel. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. and open North. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools.rte template and click Open. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Click OK. ■ For Building Construction. select Level 1. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. select Project template. (Browse). zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Click OK twice. 10 Using the same method.7 In the Project Browser. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. When you select the material. ■ ■ Under Create new. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Location. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. create another new project using the Construction template. review the construction materials listed. for City. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. under Energy Analysis. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . navigate to Imperial Templates. click (Browse).

Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. and 5 1/2". 4 1/2". Click OK twice. 22 In the right pane. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. wiring. piping. click Wiring. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. and 12 1/2". 10 1/2". for 3/4".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 23 In the left pane. and fire protection systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 11 1/2". Holding CTRL. for 3 1/2". For Categories. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 26 In the right pane. 33 Click OK. 5 1/2". 27 Click OK. under Pipe Settings.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. select Views. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. select Identity Data. click Sizes. 24 In the right pane. and demand factors for electrical systems. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 4 1/2". 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. click Rectangular. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. under Duct Settings. 25 In the left pane. under Duct Settings.rfa and click Open. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. for 3 1/2". For Ground Wire Tick Mark. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. plumbing. power distribution systems. click Round. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. Creating an MEP Project | 29 .

4 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .rvt. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. click Training. families. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. under Template file. 38 Close the file. Linking Projects In this exercise. In addition. click Browse. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. From the Positioning list. select Associated Level. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. under Create new. select Project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Select Ascending Click OK twice. For Then by.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Click Open. 5 Click OK. select Auto . Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. and groups that are contained in a project.Origin to Origin. You need to create the MEP model for the project. select View Name. For Sort by. select Sub-Discipline. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select Family and Type. Notice that the file is saved as a template. sheets. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. To enable this coordination. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

and Import dialogs. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. Save. and click OK twice. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. ➤ Open. and change the name to My Library. click (Add Value). and click (Browse). 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. Load. templates. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and select it as the library path. 15 Under Library Name.11 In the Places dialog. and click Open. or families. click My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click the My Library icon.

23 Click 24 Click OK. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. click the Spelling tab. 2 In the Options dialog. view the current path. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. such as bump maps. If you work in a large office. 27 Click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. click Places. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. 3 Under Settings. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and decal image files. 14 Click in the drawing area. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. select Ignore words in uppercase. 12 Create a new project using the default template. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 22 Select My Library. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 19 Click Cancel. click Edit. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. If you want to relocate this path. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. click OK. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 21 On the File Locations tab. 11 In the Options dialog. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. This path is determined during installation. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 5 In the text editor. specify the new location here. 9 In the text editor. 20 Click ➤ Options. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. custom color files.

Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click OK. 21 Under Personal dictionary. work with snapping turned off. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 6 In the Snaps dialog. In this exercise. 24 In the Options dialog. 2 In the New Project dialog.. 4 In the New Project dialog. 22 In the text editor. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps.17 In the Spelling dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. you modify snap increments. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 19 In the Options dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . delete sheetmtl-CU. 18 Click ➤ Options. and enter 1 . you modify snap settings. click Close. under Dimension Snaps. click the Spelling tab. click Training Files. 25 Close the file without saving it. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Restore Defaults. click File menu ➤ Save. You can turn snap settings on and off. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click OK. 20 Under Settings. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Browse.rte. 23 In the text editor. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. under Template file. click Edit.

the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. If you do not have a wheel button. This is the increment that you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. TIP To zoom while sketching. deselect Chain. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. If it does not. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. enter SM. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. such as ZO to zoom out. While sketching. zoom out until it does so. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries.7 Under Object Snaps. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. For example. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. 8 In the Snaps dialog. use the wheel button on your mouse.

Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that snapping is once again active. it will snap to the endpoints. with or without saving it. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and the wall edges. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 26 Close the file. 19 Enter SM.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Do not set the wall end point.. and specify the wall endpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and move the cursor to the right. and delete the value 1’ . If you move the cursor along the wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. 25 Click OK. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. the midpoint.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

As you create the mechanical system. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. methodology. water source heat pump (WSHP). you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will understand the process. you first plan the system. This system consists of a cooling tower. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you design a mechanical system for an office building. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. you can choose to save your work. In this lesson. At the end of the tutorial. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. 45 . This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. After applying a color scheme to the zones. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. However. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial.autodesk. By following the recommended workflow. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. and then you create a plenum level. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you first configure the linked architectural model. In this exercise. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. After finishing each exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. go to http://www. If the tutorial training files are not present.

These components are defined in the architectural training file. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and after the linked model highlights. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. select Room Bounding.rvt. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. not in the MEP training file. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. click to select it. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ceilings. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. under Constraints. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. roof. In this section.Space Plan is highlighted. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. you add a level for plenums.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. NOTE When working with a linked file. click Training Files. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. Next. and click OK. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

MEP. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and in the Plan View Types dialog.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation).6 In the Project Browser. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and enter Level 2 Plenum. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 16 Press Esc. Click Plan View Types. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. The new level is placed. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). enter 8'. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. Preparing Spaces | 47 . ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and click OK. For Offset. and double-click West . 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. 9 On the Draw panel. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level).

and then place spaces in various types of areas. NOTE After finishing each exercise. right-click Level 2 Plenum. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. select Design. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Under View Depth. and click Properties. you can choose to save your work. enter an Offset of 1' 0". This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. In the next exercise. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. ■ Click OK twice. you place spaces in areas of the building model. select Plenum Plan. For Cut plane. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. for Level. However.Plenum. for Top. In this exercise. for View Scale. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select MEP . and for Offset. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. 20 In the Project Browser. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . enter 0. For Sub-Discipline. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. select Level Above (Level 3). for Default View Template.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. Under Extents. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. click Edit. In this exercise. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. for View Range.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . right-click Level 2 Plenum. For View Classification. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. Under Identity Data. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.

and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. walls. select Level 2 Plenum.Space Plan is highlighted. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Upper Limit. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. and ceilings). For Offset. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Horizontal.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For (Tag Location). You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. click Training Files. Placing Spaces | 49 . For Space. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. enter 0. select New. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i.rvt.

ensuring coordination between the files. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Number. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter Library. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Name. 14 In the drawing area. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.7 Click to place the space. Click OK. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 219.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 9 Select the space.

Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. and then click Modify. enter 0. For Offset. 21 Using the method learned previously. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. Placing Spaces | 51 . 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. select Level 3. For Upper Limit. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. you place a space in a large corridor area. 23 Click OK. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. under Energy Analysis.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. and then split the space using a space separation line.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. for Upper Limit. and for Offset. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. 5 On the Options Bar. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and then press Esc. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. select Level 3. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i.

as shown. double-click the space name. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. which was numbered 219Q. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and press Enter. 11 Close the schedule view. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. the plan view would have updated with the changes.7 In the Project Browser. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. and scroll to the newly placed space. change the space number to 216A. 10 Using the same method. 9 In the floor plan. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the schedule. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. enter Corridor.

Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.15 Press Esc twice. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 16 Using the method learned previously. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. place a space in the lower area of the split space. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt.Space Plan is highlighted. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. you place a space in a chase. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. If necessary.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . but that the space does not fill the entire chase. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. In the plan view. select Level 3. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. and then click OK. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 6 Enter VG. for Upper Limit. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 10 In the plan view. select Roof Level. click in the chase area to place the space. for Upper Limit. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. enter 4'. Under Identity Data. select the space. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. enter 225PC. expand Spaces. For Number. For Limit Offset. right-click. for Name. select Interior and Reference. On the Options Bar. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. ■ ■ 14 Click OK.4 Press Esc. 12 Click in the section view. enter 0. and click Element Properties. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter Chase.

17 Type ZF. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. under Loaded Tags. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and maximize the view. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.Bounding elements (such as walls. ceilings. select Space Tag With Volume. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . All spaces in the view are tagged. 15 Press Esc. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the next exercises. and click OK. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. floors. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog.Space Plan.

under Spaces. In this exercise. click Training Files. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . Notice that Default is currently the only zone. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.rvt. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. it is automatically added to the Default zone. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Zoning is highlighted. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. which removes the space from the Default zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). To display space reference lines. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. 1 In the Project Browser. After a space is placed in an area. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. click Reference. click View ➤ Zones.

Next. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The Zone tool is active. you can add or remove a space from the zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verify the zones in the System Browser.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. double-click 121 Cafeteria. the Edit Zone tab displays. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Occupiable. and Electrical 220 spaces. 4 In the drawing area. Using the Edit Zone tab. under Spaces. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and modify the zone properties. indicating that it’s the active view. and click Finish Editing Zone. and a new zone is created. click Training Files. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. click Reference. To display space reference lines. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Zoning is highlighted. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Energy Analysis. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. indicating that the space is occupiable. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. you assign spaces to zones in the building. you assign spaces to a zone. select Computer Lab 222. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i.5 In the System Browser. Instruction 221. As you do this.

Instruction. select HVAC Zones. 5 With the drawing area active. Expand HVAC Zones. type VG. you need to activate the zone visibility. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. To view the zone in the drawing area. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).In the System Browser. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Click OK. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 .

indicating that it’s the active view. for Name. click Finish Editing Zone. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.Zoning. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. expand 2 . under Identity Data. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. To display space reference lines.Area B. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. and click OK. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter 2 . and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify the zone in the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. You activated zone visibility in the views. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the System Browser.rvt. In this exercise.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files.West . 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Reference. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 11 Close the System Browser. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i.Zoning is highlighted. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . under Spaces.West .

and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view.Zoning floor plan. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click in the Level 2 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Verify that the distance is 1/2". 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. zoom out.Zoning view to activate it. 15 Press Esc. 8 In the Level 1 . Select Attached End. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning view.5 Click in the Level 1 . 9 With the Add Space tool active. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.

Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes.rvt. enter Lounge . View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. on the ViewCube. click the corner where the Top. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. space. double-click Level 1 . 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click the zone tag. for Name Value. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you verify the building.Zoning view.East.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. and zone information. Front. click Training Files. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. and click OK.Zoning to make it the active view. In this exercise. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.

click (Isolate). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Next. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you isolate the space. verify that Wireframe is selected. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. Click (Highlight). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. and select 109 Lounge. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. Using the Highlight tool. With 109 Lounge selected. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands.

the space information displays for the selected space. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. and click OK. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select 109 Lounge. For Electrical Loads. click . For Construction Type. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and then click OK. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ ■ ■ Next. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. select Lounge/Recreation. select 1_South_Lounge. Next. verify that <Building> is selected. click . scroll down in the left pane. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For People. and in the People dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and then click OK. and in the Electrical Loads dialog.■ On the Details tab. Below the list of spaces and zones.

For Cooling Information. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that 74. This indicates the outdoor air per person. Next. click (Shading). highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. verify that 70.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. and air changes per hour.00 °F : N/A is specified. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. floors. and humidification set point. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and dehumidification set point.00 °F : 54. This indicates the cooling set point. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. the zone information displays for the selected zone. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector.00 °F : 90. cooling air temperature. and other room-bounding components. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. outdoor air per area. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Heating Information. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. heating air temperature. verify that <Building> is selected. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. This indicates the heating set point. roofs.00 °F : N/A is specified. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . 12 Using the methods learned previously. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point.

Because this is an unoccupied space. enter 212P. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Under Energy Analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Under Energy Analysis. enter 0. open MEP . For Name. for Number. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. select Plenum. select Level 3. click Cancel. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 15 In the Project Browser. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Click OK. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). For Offset. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Location. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. for City. click in the Value field. verify that Manchester. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. and zone information. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. space. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. you verified building. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. select School or University. and select space Plenum 212P. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. In this exercise.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 .Space Plan. and verify that the space has replaced the void. On the Place tab. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. is selected. click Training Files. enter 03101. For Postal Code. for Energy Data.rvt. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 . click Edit. under Energy Analysis. NH.

■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. right-click. and click OK. verify that 1' 0" is specified. verify that New Construction is selected. for Values. Under Heat Gain (per Person). select space Library 219. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. For Building Construction. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. you need to select this option. and click OK. verify that Occupiable is selected. For Condition Type. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that Level 1 is selected. and click Element Properties. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. For Sensible. select Specified. and click OK. for Values. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Space Type. For Latent. for Building Service. For Export Complexity. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Specified. For Project Phase. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and enter 50 sq.Audio Visual. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. this option adjusts the times automatically. enter 150 Btu/h. In order to select a space. enter 200 Btu/h. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. a cooling load. under Volume Computations. If. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). ft. both. verify that <Building> is specified. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. ■ On the Weather tab. Select Area per person. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. For People.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Ground Plane. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. or neither. click in the Value column. and then click . select Heated and cooled. click Edit. Click OK twice. select Library . verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. 8 In the drawing area. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Building Service. You should correct the space error in the building model. Select the space associated with the warning. Under Power. is specified. click Edit. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. You have verified the building information. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and can be modified here. verify that School or University is selected. verify that <Building> is specified. Next. For Location. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 .■ ■ ■ Click OK. Click OK twice. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and click OK. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. For Building Construction. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. select Actual. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. NH. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and under Heating Information. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). verify that Manchester. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. select Actual. and click to learn the cause for the warning. 12 Click the Details tab. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. For Electrical Loads. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. click Calculate. click Information). select 219 Library. for Values. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . for Values. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. There should be no warnings displayed.

Click OK. 21 Click OK. and zone information for the building model. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. or make any changes to the model. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 19 In the drawing area. click to the right of the building to place the legend. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and a loads report displays. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. or zone information. 17 In the loads report. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 16 After you review the loads report. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. weather. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. Notice that the space information was automatically updated.Space Plan. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. select HVAC Zones. select 219 Library. under Energy Analysis. space. In this exercise. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. space. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. For Color Scheme. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 15 Review the loads report for project.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes.

Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. in 1-ton increments. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. under Schemes. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.5 Zoom in to the legend. select Tonnage Range. The new scheme displays in the view. and click OK. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select the color scheme legend.

The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 11 Using the method learned previously. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

Select Schedule building components. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.Space Fill is the active view. select New Construction. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Click OK.rvt. more category options are available. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 .12 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. For Phase. for Select available fields from. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. select Spaces. select Spaces. enter Space Airflow Schedule. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. For Name. click Training Files. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model.

76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields.■ Under Available fields. For Then by. select Number. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Level. select Not Between. For Discipline. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Type. In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Formula. Header. Click OK. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select Air Flow. select Calculated Supply Airflow. click (Browse). enter Airflow Delta. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. enter . In the Fields dialog. and then click Conditional Format. For Formula. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select Ascending.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. select HVAC. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. ■ Click Calculated Value. for Formula. For Fields. select Level. and click OK. and then click . and then select Hidden field. and Blank line. select Airflow Delta. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule.

you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. In this exercise. ■ The schedule displays. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. a view opens that contains the selected space. For Background Color. Under Conditions to Use. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In the Color dialog. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. and click OK. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. verify that Show is highlighted. select red. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. In the next lesson. In later exercises. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. right-click to access schedule properties.■ ■ ■ For Value. click the color swatch. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Click OK twice.

78 .

In this lesson. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you modify air terminal parameters. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. Then. you will create supply air systems. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. and work with the airflow schedule. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After system creation. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals. 79 . you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. After completing the air systems lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan.

and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . the space crossing lines display. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Training Files. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and scroll to space 223. 3 In the ceiling view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

click Place on Face. which in this case is the ceiling grid. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and press Enter. 9 On the Placement panel.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . and press Enter. 13 On the Options Bar. If the host element is modified or moved. 17 Move the cursor down. enter 425 CFM. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. type 12.Rectangular Face Round Neck . Also.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . the hosted elements are updated as well. as shown. and select Supply Diffuser . select the diffuser. for Flow. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. verify that Constrain is cleared. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. and then press Esc to end the command.

as shown. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and then press Esc. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Yes. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 28 On the Placement tab.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click Place on Face. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. As you place the return diffusers. select one of the diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines.rfa. 25 In the drawing area. Next. clear Leader. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 22 In the drawing area. and click Open. 29 Place 2 diffusers. 21 On the Options Bar.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object.

and click to select the lines. under Other. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . as shown.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 31 In the alert dialog. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. for Reference. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 32 In the Project Browser. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. Level. and click OK. select Strong Reference. select one of the return diffusers. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. click Yes.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . For the start point. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. ■ ■ For the end point. 44 Zoom in to space 115. click the Level 1 line. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. for Constraints ➤ Offset.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 9' 0"2750.

and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.rvt. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .Press Esc. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click View ➤ Systems. However.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. After creating the logical connection. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . the space crossing lines display. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. When you highlight a space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. right-click the title. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components.Design is highlighted. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. indicating that it’s the active view. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. including energy analysis. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. click Training Files.

Connect Into. and Flow value. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. As you add diffusers to systems. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 6 Keep the System Browser open. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. System Name. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 Click Cancel. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. review the Number of Elements. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. 12 In the System Browser. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. the number of elements is updated. 11 In the drawing area. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. On the Options Bar.

19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 26 Click Finish Editing System. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. the air terminals are the children. and the system connects them. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. 22 Click OK. for Mark. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. under Identity Data. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. Rename the system Next. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. which updates the name in the System Browser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 18 Click OK. 25 Click OK. In this exercise. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. In this exercise. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser.17 Using the method learned previously. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. for System Name. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Also. indicating that it’s the active view. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. the space crossing lines display. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. click Training Files. select the upper left diffuser. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . which provides various layout tools. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. for Solution Type. A Generate Layout tab displays. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the Network type provides several solutions.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). In this case. select Network. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and display solution 1. 4 In the drawing area.

For Offset.7 On the Options Bar. Click OK. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. enter 9' 10 1/2". For Duct Type. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings.Round. enter 9' 10 1/2". Select Branch. as shown. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. you’ll get an error in a later step. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. click Modify. click Settings. For Offset. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. enter 3'. For Duct Type. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . For Flex Duct Type.

The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. For example. as is the elbow itself.11 Click Finish Layout. or offset elevations are incorrect. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . or manually modify the duct. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. select a different layout solution.

select Duct Color Fill . NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. a disconnection exists. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. for Values Displayed. and click to select it. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Usually. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and equipment. fittings.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. Using a flow-based color scheme. The first time you press Tab. and then click OK. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. under Graphics. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights.Flow. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. If the entire network does not highlight. and click OK. highlight a segment of the main duct. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. but not all values are used in this view. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. thus it is not part of the system. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. for Color Scheme. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. select By View. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend.

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 20 In the drawing area. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. select Duct Color Fill . 26 Click OK. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical . 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog.Velocity. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. and click OK. and press Enter. and on the Options Bar. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.Airflow. for Schemes. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. for Flow. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and then press Esc to clear the selection. select the WSHP. select the color scheme legend. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. select one of the diffusers in the system.

Click OK. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and enter . select Calculated Size Only. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork and fittings are updated. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. for Branch Sizing. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Friction. Select the upper segment of main duct. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). Select Restrict Height. and select 16". and then click to select it. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it.08 in-wg/100ft.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. highlight a segment of the duct. and drag it to the right. Select Only. click Cancel. Under Constraints.

33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). static pressure. Using this tool. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss. pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow.

Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.NOTE As you inspect a system. also known as the critical path. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 35 Click Finish. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 36 Close the file with or without saving it.

2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Design is highlighted. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . and click to specify the end of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . and click Draw Duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and select the WSHP. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. select 9' 10 1/2". use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. right-click the connector grip. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. double-click MEP . and click Draw Duct. Front. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. for Offset.3D MEP. NOTE When drawing duct. 14 In the Project Browser. select the top right diffuser. 15 On the ViewCube. click the corner where the Top. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The ductwork is automatically created. 19 In the drawing area. the color fill indicates the flow value. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 22 Using the same method. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). it is considered a closed loop. Also. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. in space 115.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . select the top unconnected supply diffuser.

Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . You can ignore the warning. zoom in to the open end of the main duct.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. 25 Press Esc. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.

Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 30 Press Esc twice.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. and click to select it. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and then click Modify. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 .

clear Restrict Height. such as a plenum. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Constraints. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click OK. under Mechanical . 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.Airflow. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 40 Using the same method. for Flow. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. select a segment of the main duct. and then click OK.

Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. 109 . Automatically and manually lay out piping. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. In this lesson. including 2 base mounted pumps. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Create return and supply piping systems. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Then. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.

on level 3 of the building model. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files.rvt. you place mechanical equipment. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Left Return . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. verify that Wall faces is selected. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.High Efficiency . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.2-6 Tons . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. in corridor 328. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Horizontal .HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and select WSHP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.

and click to place the dimension. and in the Type Selector. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and enter 2'. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. click the dimension. click the top edge of the WSHP. 10 Select the WSHP. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. as shown.8 Click the corridor wall face.

19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Water Flow. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Under Mechanical. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . enter 12 GPM. select the 2 WSHPs. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 9'.14 Click Modify. as shown.

Create the logical connection between the system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.21 Click Modify. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. you create the return and supply piping systems. including flow and pressure. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses.

5 In the System Browser. and click View ➤ Piping. click Training Files. analyses cannot be performed.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. right-click the Systems column heading. where it is easier to review the information. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. You can create pipes to connect system components. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.Mech 330). Unlike logical connections (systems). This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. but without a corresponding system. Creating a Piping System | 115 .HVAC Plan .

9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. As you assign equipment to systems. 12 In the drawing area. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return.In the System Browser. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. This display indicates that the system is selected. for System Name. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. and the Edit System tool is not active. Notice that on the Options Bar. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. select the 2 WSHPs. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. Therefore. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. while pressing Ctrl. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 10 On the Options Bar. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Assigning a system component to an existing system. select the boiler.

and select the cooling tower. You have created the hydronic return system. double-click Roof . for System Name. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 19 In the Project Browser.Design. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. Creating a Piping System | 117 . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.HVAC Plan . 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.13 Click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. under Design ➤ HVAC .

29 Right-click CHWS. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and click OK. and click Expand All.22 In the Select Connector dialog. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 25 Select the boiler. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 26 Click Finish Editing System. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 23 Close the roof plan view. In heating mode. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. expand the Hydronic Return system category. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 28 Using the same method. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. indicating the logical connection. and bypasses the cooling tower. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. and click Select. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. In cooling mode.

you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. expand Piping. 31 In the Column Settings dialog.In the System Browser. and click OK. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Properties. including the flow rate and size of the component. for Water Flow. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. you can view several parameters. and click OK. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . You also manually modify the layout path as required. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. enter 18 GPM. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. 32 In the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. under Mechanical. and click Column Settings.

HVAC Plan . You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 In the Filter dialog. A system preview displays in red. and click to select it. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. click Check None. and click OK. When you draw a box to select components. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . then the Select a System dialog displays. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. select CHWR.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. the boiler. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Click OK. you can place the cursor over a system component. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. click Training Files. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted. 9 In the Select a System dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. select Mechanical Equipment.Mech 330). press Tab to highlight the system. indicating that it’s the active view.

15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type.11 On the Options Bar. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. For Inset. enter 1' 6''. click Settings. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. duct. select Perimeter. 13 Click Cancel. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. It does not reference the architecture. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. structural beams. or architectural components. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that Solutions is selected.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. to display the path with thinner lines. and press Tab 3 times. and the flow for the other is 12. With each Tab. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 19 In the drawing area. the flow for one WSHP is 18. 17 Optionally. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. 18 Place the cursor over the piping.16 Click Finish Layout. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). under Mechanical. and click OK. 23 Under Mechanical. and access its instance properties. 24 Press Esc. and click OK.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Select the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. Next. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). which propagates flow throughout the system.HVAC Plan . the Number of Elements is now 8. you physically close the CHWR loop. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 27 On the System Tools panel. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. click Edit System.Design. double-click Level 1 . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . On the Options Bar. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. Logically. 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.Design ➤ Floor Plans.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 32 Click Finish Editing System.

34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. under Mechanical. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and click Cancel. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 35 Using the drag control. select a WSHP. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. access its instance properties. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 38 Using the same method. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). as shown.

and then click OK. 41 Click OK. select CHWS. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . For Slope. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select Perimeter 1 of 5. enter 1' 6''. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above.40 In the Select a System dialog. For Inset. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Click Settings. enter 0''/12''.

(Both sections are at the same elevation.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. as shown. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 48 While pressing Ctrl. 46 Click Modify. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay).) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. as shown. 47 In the drawing area. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. In a later exercise.

50 Using the same method. or offset elevations are incorrect. To create the piping system. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Either relocate the system components. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Add piping to close the supply loop. 51 Click Finish Layout. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select a different layout solution. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry.

you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. As you work in the training file. and the return pipes are magenta.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Design is highlighted. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. as shown. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. double-click 3D HVAC Building. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.HVAC Plan . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

select the section of piping. as shown. 7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 6 Press Delete. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 9 In the 3D view. Click to specify the reference point. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler. ■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection.

and the lower one is secondary. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and click Draw Pipe. select the boiler. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. 13 In the plan view. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and click OK. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. select the return pipe riser. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. 12 In the 3D view. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. The connections are automatically created.

Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.7''. and you select 1 connector. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 2'. for Offset. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ Move the cursor down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. and press Enter. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. enter 1' . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.In a plan view. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.

Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 19 In the plan view. As you place piping runs that are close together.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 18 Press Esc twice. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. and the appropriate fittings are created. select the primary base mounted pump. and click OK. as shown. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. and select it. 21 In the Select Connector dialog.

26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click Draw Pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . you select the tee fitting. 29 If necessary. right-click the bottom connector. and click to draw the pipe.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and when the connector point displays. and click the minus symbol. 27 Move the cursor to the right. 28 Press Esc. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. click to connect to the pump. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.

enter 4'. for Offset. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the discharge connector.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and press Enter. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. enter 9' 6''. ■ Move the cursor down. right-click the bottom control on the tee. type 1'. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe.

37 Click Modify. you validate the flow through the system. Next. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . right-click. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. and click Element Properties. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. You now have a closed loop system.

and click OK. notice that under Mechanical. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. the value is 0 GPM. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. as shown. Connect the cooling tower Next. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Press Esc. 42 Click OK. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). and click Element Properties. 48 In the plan view. under Mechanical. for Cooling Water Flow. 46 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. under Mechanical.50 or 50% of the Flow. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. When you create the pumps in parallel. 44 In the 3D view. view the properties for the secondary pump. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 41 Using the same method.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . notice that Flow is 125 GPM. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 40 Click Cancel. The flow is being propagated through the piping. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet).

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.■ Lower pipe (outlet).

You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). Adding Valves In this exercise. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. and close the dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. the water bypasses the cooling tower. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. and is heated by the boiler. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50 In the 3D View. When the valve is open. select the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower.

2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. The bypass valve is closed by default. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position.HVAC Plan . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. as shown. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 4 On the Options Bar. 8 Press Esc twice. and select Ball Valve . Adding Valves | 143 .

15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Using the same method.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve. place another Ball Valve . 12 Select Ball Valve . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. In heating mode. and click Element Properties. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. under Mechanical. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. and select Ball Valve . validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and click OK. right-click. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the bypass valve. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. and select Ball Valve .) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). Adding Valves | 145 . 19 Using the same method.

Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Initially. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view.22 Using the method you just learned. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. click Training Files. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.rvt. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing.

and click OK.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Flow. select Pipe Color Fill .Size. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. Sizing Pipe | 147 . click Pipe Color Fill . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK.

select Friction. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. Click OK.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Under Constraints. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. 13 Press Esc. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. enter 5 FPS. and for Velocity. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. for Branch Sizing. and click to select the branch. and enter 2.25 FT/100ft. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Select And.

rvt. Inspecting the System | 149 . pressure. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or offset elevations are incorrect. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. Inspecting the System In this exercise. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. select a different layout solution.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Using the System Inspector.Design ➤ 3D Views. click Training Files.

4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. An inspection flag reports the section number. as required. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). flow.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This information helps you modify the system design. and pressure information including pressure loss. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. inspect Section 6 again. 10 Click Finish. the Static Pressure is 7. and to size pipe. select 90° F. and click OK. In this exercise.67 psi. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. and the Pressure Loss is 1.89 psi.88 psi. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. targeting those systems that need attention. you need to validate them.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. for Fluid Temperature. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . Note that the Flow is 80 GPM.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. 9 Using the same method.

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . As you learned when placing components. 6 In the Project Browser. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.Design. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. click Training Files. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. For example. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. and for pipe sizing. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Warnings display. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 4 In the System Browser. and click Show to view all of the system components. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. right-click the Systems titlebar. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. After you assign components to a system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. and double-click Level 3 .rvt. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. thus assigning the components to a system. double-click Level 1 . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 7 In the System Browser. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. In the System Browser. and click View. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 9 Right-click CHWS.HVAC Plan . This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). If you place components without assigning them to a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. the pipe is associated with that system.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. After you have assigned all components to systems. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.HVAC Plan .

and confirm unassigned system components. and select Level 3 . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 13 Right-click CHWR. 12 In the System Browser.Design floor plan. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 14 Using the methods that you learned. right-click Hydronic Return. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Expand All. click Close. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.HVAC Plan . expand the Unassigned folder. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. otherwise. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 10 Using the same methods.

154 .

155 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

expand Wiring . select Copper. select Wiring Types.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. enter THHN. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You also add a wiring type. click (Open).rvt. In this exercise you review electrical settings. speeding up the design phase. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. click Training Files. ■ ■ For Factor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and demand factors that are applied in the design. select 90. select Copper.Wire Sizes. wiring.04. For Temperature Rating. ■ Click New Correction Factor. For Temperature. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select 75. ■ ■ For Material. enter 1. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . distribution systems. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. Select Correction Factor. Click OK. As you place components and create circuits. For Material.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ For Value. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click Background Color. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. select Red. for Custom Colors. Click OK three times.

Create power loads. power circuits. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. 167 . you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Create a panel schedule. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. as you place lighting fixtures. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Then. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. First. Use the System Browser to check your design. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components.

■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. By using orange as the color for this range. for the Spaces Category. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Orange. In the left pane of the Open dialog.00 fc. Click OK. select the color for Less Than 20. click Training Files.Lighting Color Fill view is open. 2 In the drawing area. Under Scheme Definition. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . In the Color dialog. select the color legend.rvt. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. select Average Estimated Illumination. for Basic Colors.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . You can create additional color schemes.00 fc. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. click (Open).

expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Lighting Ceiling plan. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. The red field will clear once the +/. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. which is the lowest value in the specified range.277. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.5 fc range. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.5 fc range is satisfied.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. zoom to space Library 219. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 8 In the Project Browser. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 13 Click the Level 2 . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.7 In the Project Browser. 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.

so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 20 Select the lighting fixture. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. select Multiple. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 25 On the Options Bar. the fixtures will move accordingly. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Click to place the fixture. 23 Click OK. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. select Multiple. 28 In the drawing area. select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 30 On the Options Bar. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Note the value in red for the space Library 219.32 Press ESC. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window.

select Lighting Fixtures. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . click Check None. Click OK.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category. 36 In the Filter dialog.277V.

Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 41 On the Options Bar. select Multiple Alignment.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 42 In the drawing area. The lighting delta is satisfied. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . Note the changes for the space Library 219. click the ceiling grid line as shown.277V.

The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . 46 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise.45 Press ESC to end the command. click (Open). click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you modify the light fixture IES files.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 2 Tile the views as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .Lighting Color Fill plan. scroll to view space space Library 219.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Lighting Plan.

click the value for Light Loss Factor. enter 162. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Click OK. ■ Under Photometrics. Under Photometrics. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Under Photometrics. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . for Color Preset. enter . 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. select T5 [HO]. In the Name dialog. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. ■ Click Apply. Under Identity Data.93. select Xenon and click OK. enter F15. select 463T5_S. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. for Type Mark.ies and click Open. click the value for Initial Intensity. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 .■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ Click OK twice. select Luminous Flux.85. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. specify 15000.00 VA. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. click the value for Initial Color. for Lamp. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics.00 lm. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. for Apparent Load. and click OK. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. enter . Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads.277V and click OK.

11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and for Category. click Check None.277V.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 In the Filter dialog. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.

16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 15 In space Library 219.Press Delete. Note the lighting delta updates again. select the top center fixture.

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command.

Placing Switches. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. you add switches. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. In the next exercise. click (Open). 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Junction Boxes. 2 In the drawing area. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Placing Switches.Press Delete. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Junction Boxes. junction boxes. and receptacles to your design. and Receptacles | 183 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 7 Click to place the switch. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .

Junction Boxes. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. and Receptacles | 185 .rfa and click Open.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.NoLoad. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command. Select Junction Boxes . Placing Switches. 12 In the Load Family dialog. The element type Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

for Level 2 . Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. Click Edit Type. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK twice. 15 Select the junction box. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. note the Number of Poles is 1. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 9’0”.Offset. zoom to space Library 219. 21 In the drawing area. enter JB-1NL. In the Type Properties dialog. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. Under Electrical. NOTE When entering values.14 Press ESC to end the command. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . for Mark.

dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Select Load. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Space Number. Distribution System. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . right-click and click Column Settings. Space Name. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Expand General. 24 For any column. 23 In the System Browser. Junction Boxes. Select Size. Expand Electrical. NOTE If necessary. and Voltage. 26 In the System Browser. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. and Number of Elements. Placing Switches. Click OK.

Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 31 Close the System Browser.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.

Placing Switches.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle. Junction Boxes.

enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down. move the cursor along the wall. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Placing Switches. Junction Boxes.43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 .

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard.

Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it.

2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click (Open). and work toward the higher voltage.equipment. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP).rvt. click Training Files. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Adding wiring to a project is optional. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . zoom to the space Electrical 220.

11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Click OK. For Panel Name. 14 Select the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 7 Press ESC to end the command. select 120/208 Wye.Surface: 100A. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . select 480/277 Wye. enter 20. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 8 Select the panelboard. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. for Max. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. for Distribution System. for Distribution System. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. #1 Pole Breakers. enter PP-2B.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . which is the logical connection between the elements. Click OK.Loads. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 20 In the drawing area. #1 Pole Breakers. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Instruction 221. For Panel Name. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 23 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. for Max. click Check None. enter LP-2B.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

33 Select the switch on the right. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .28 Press ESC to end the command. 32 Press ESC. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 35 Select the left three-way switch.

click (Open). click Check None.Loads. 41 In the Filter dialog. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. and for Category. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. Click OK. Click OK. 38 Press ESC to end the command. enter 2. Next you create circuits without showing wire. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Hot Conductors. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. except without wire.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Wires. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .

Voltage. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. click Training Files. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Power. 13 In the System Browser. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. ■ 16 In the System Browser. and then expand circuit 1. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 2 In the drawing area. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. Rating. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.rvt. Distribution System. and verify that Load. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Expand Electrical. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and Voltage Drop are selected. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 .

The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 22 With the junction box still selected. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. change the Voltage to 277V. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 30 Close the System Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click Edit Type. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. click below the first one to place it.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. for Type Mark. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Click Tags. enter FR4. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Click Yes. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 47 In the drawing area. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 40 Click OK twice. under Identity Data. note the label parameters and click Cancel. Click OK.

and click Apply. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and for Category. 56 In the Filter dialog.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Click OK. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 52 In the Save As dialog. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only.rfa. enter a comma. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. for File Name. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Next you create a switch system. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Click OK. select Lighting Fixture Tags. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. click Check None. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Click Save. For Circuit Number. Click OK. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. select Break.

click (Open). Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter a. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 2 In the drawing area. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.rvt. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. under Electrical Lighting. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. for Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Click OK.

206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. under Electrical .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.Lighting. for switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Click OK. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. enter b. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.

lighting. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and for Category. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.26 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 4 In the Filter dialog. select the PP-2B panel. select Electrical Fixtures. click Training Files. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and data systems. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Circuits are used for power. 7 In space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. Click OK. click Check None. Creating Power Loads | 207 .

Loads. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 19 Click OK. under Electrical . 13 Select the wire again. and click Element Properties. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and click Open. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select Long Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. enter 2. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. Click OK.rfa.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. for Hot Conductors. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. select Wiring. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and in the drawing area. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog.

press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. as shown. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. select the PP-2B panel. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. and click to select the circuit.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 22 In space Electrical 220. Creating Power Loads | 209 .

and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. 28 In the drawing area. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.26 Press Delete. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. in space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click the connector of the first receptacle.

Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. 2 In the drawing area. select panel LP-2B. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 3 In the Electrical space. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. click Training Files. zoom to space Electrical 220. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Next you balance the loads for your design. click Open. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Finally.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

while Phase B provides 2004 VA. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. enter 30A. for Rating. 1-#12. Under Electrical-Loads. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12.3712 VA. B. and Phase C . 14 Close the warning dialog. 1-#10. 1-#12. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Scroll down. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 6 Click OK. 1-#10. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. 12 Select panel PP-2B. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Notice that the loads on Phase A. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. click Rebalance Loads. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Phase B 3636 VA. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B.3616 VA).

23 With panel PP-2B still selected. under Electrical .Loads. enter 30A. click (Open). click Training Files. for Rating. 17 Close the warning dialog. Select PP-2B. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Electrical . The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Rating. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. enter 25A. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.Loads. Click OK. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. and click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Next you create a panel schedule.15 Select panel PP-2B. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected.rvt. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. and click OK. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 26 Close the file with or without saving it. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window.

10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. for Font. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 1/8. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Under Body Text. enter 3/32. Under Header Text. click (Open). Under Header Text. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. click Training Files. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. 11 Click OK twice. 5 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. select Berlin Sans FB. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. for Font Size. under Other. for Appearance. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. 7 Select the schedule. select Bold and Italic. 4 Close the report. and open E601 . 6 In the Project Browser. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. for Font Size.rvt. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. click Edit.Panel Schedules. expand Sheets (all). 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.

12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. select space Lounge 212. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Checking Your Design | 215 . notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. each with a load of 180VA. Expand Unassigned. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once.

22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Electrical 214. 18 Select panel LP-2C. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 17 In the drawing area. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. for Panel.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 20 On the Options Bar. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. select MDP-1. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 In the dialog. 16 Close the details dialog. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. under Warnings. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

and click OK. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. right-click PVC . in addition to loading existing families. 219 .rvt. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. In this lesson.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you create a PVC pipe type.Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify that Level 1 . 4 In the Name dialog.Design is open. click Duplicate. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Vent.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Adding a pipe size. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Sanitary. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. click Training Files. 2 In the Project Browser. type PVC . and click Properties. planning is critical to a successful design. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .

click Modify. 13 In the right panel. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. In the Project Browser. enter 1/2''.PVC . for Material. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Branch. 27 For the new pipe size.DWV: Standard. and click OK. 6 Click OK. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. Tap. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary.DWV: Standard. 21 In the right pane. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. under Pipe Types.Sch 40 . 24 For Inside Diameter.Vent is listed. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. under Mechanical. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. select Tee Vent . 15 For System Type.PVC . enter 5/8''. 26 Click OK. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.5 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 Click New Size. Cross.rfa. select Sanitary. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 17 In the left pane. select None. 25 For Outside. for Nominal. PVC . select Tee Reducing Double Vent . select Sanitary.0''. enter 27/32''. 10 On the Selection panel. click Training Files. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.Sch 40 .PVC .DWV. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 18 For System Type. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . select Tee. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Main. Tee. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Plastic. For Offset. click Pipe Settings. enter 10°.Sch 40 . enter -4' .

Create the sanitary plumbing system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. and hot and cold water piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the hot water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. including plumbing fixtures. add a hot water heater. sanitary piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. 221 . vent. Create the cold water system.

NOTE To identify a space name and number. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. and verify that Level 1 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan . move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. you add 2 toilets. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. 1 urinal. click Training Files. including the men’s room (space Male 107).

as shown. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 1 wall-mounted urinal. against the left wall.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 5 On the Placement panel. select Public . and 3 sinks. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.6 gpf. in the Type Selector.Wall Mounted. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. under Water Closet .Flush Valve . 4 On the Element panel. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.1.

zoom in closer. use the reference line to center the fixture.7 Click to place another toilet. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. (Again. under Urinal .Wall Hung.) 8 Press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. and press Esc. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. above the first in the standard toilet space. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

under Floor Drain . 14 Click Modify. click Place on Face. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer .Rectangular. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 12 On the Placement panel.2'' Drain.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector. In placing the fixture. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

and review the components listed under this system. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click View ➤ Piping. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. a urinal. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click in the System Browser table heading. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and a floor drain. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Design is open. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Plumbing Plan . 2 In the Project Browser. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . 6 In the plan view. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 8 In the Filter dialog. and click OK. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. You include the bathroom space number in the name. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. If you deselected the drain. so the Create Sanitary System is available. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. click Finish Editing System.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. 13 In the Systems Browser. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 12 On the Edit System panel. 11 On the Options Bar. expand Sanitary. enter Sanitary 107. for System Name.

16 In the Select a System dialog. select Sanitary 107.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. for example. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. select one of the components in the system. and click OK. as shown. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. The base is placed. a toilet. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

enter -1' 0''. and click OK. enter -4'-0”. and modify it to meet project requirements. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. click Solutions. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. for Slope. for Diameter. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 26 On the Options Bar. select 4''. 21 On Options Bar. You accept this suggested solution. select Branch. for Solution Type. 25 On the Options Bar. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select Main. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Offset. The default settings are automatically modified. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. and for Offset. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. and click Settings. enter -1' 0''.19 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. select Intersections. 23 For Offset. 24 In the left pane.

select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.30 In the 3D view. 31 Click Modify. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

34 On the Generate Layout panel.33 Using the previous method. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. When a fitting is reversed. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.

and check the slope control. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. 38 Close the file with or without saving it.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. adding sinks in the men’s room. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. as shown.

and verify that Level 1 . 4 On the Element panel. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. select 22''x22'' . in the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Rectangular.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. under Lavatory . click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Plumbing Plan .Public.Design is open. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. as shown. 5 On the Placement panel. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. select Multiple. On the Options Bar. For example. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. TIP When entering dimensions. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. enter 2' 4''. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. and press Enter to create a second sink.7 Click Modify. 8 Select the sink. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point.

■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. click Add To System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter to create the third sink. 11 In the System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 12 In the drawing area. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. Press Esc. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.

and click Draw Pipe. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. double-click 3D Plumbing. as shown. 19 In the 3D view. 20 Select the fitting. with the tee fitting selected. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 21 Select the tee. 22 In the plan view.In the System Browser. under Design ➤ Plumbing . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.Design ➤ 3D Views. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

6''. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar. for Offset. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. In this example.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. When you press the Spacebar. for Slope. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. and click Apply. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 2' . enter 1/8'' / 12''. 27 Click Modify. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click to draw the pipe. 24 On the Options Bar.

under Wye 45 Deg Double . 29 In the Type Selector. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 31 Click Modify.DWV.Sch 40 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 32 Select the double wye fitting.PVC . move the cursor over the stub pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . select Standard. 30 In the 3D view. and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting.

and click Draw Pipe. In the next steps. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 37 Select the fitting. double-click the section head to open the section view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right.33 With the fitting selected. for Offset. on the Options Bar. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 34 Press Esc. enter 1'. right-click the right connector. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 6''. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view.

draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 42 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 40 Click Modify. as shown. 41 Using the same method. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. and click to place the pipe.

244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 46 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe. 49 Using the same method.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. and press Esc. 47 Move the cursor down. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. right-click the bottom connector. enter 6''. 48 Click Modify. press Spacebar. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe.

place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 55 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. select the P-Trap on the left. 53 Using the same method. select Standard.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.DWV.PVC . 54 Click Modify. 56 Using the same method. 51 In the Type Selector. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. under Trap P . 52 In the plan view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .

59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and click Draw Pipe.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. select the left P-Trap. connect the right sink to the double wye. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Click in the plan view. Click Modify. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. and press Enter. In the plan view. Move the cursor to the left. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. enter 6''.. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 58 Using the same method.

click Finish to select the recommended solution. Press Esc. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select the section of pipe you just drew. under Pipe Types. In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. and select a proposed solution. while pressing Ctrl.■ In the 3D view. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. as shown. select PVC Sanitary. while pressing Ctrl. On the Routing Solutions panel.

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. and verify the slope. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. 62 On the Options Bar.rvt. adjusting the sanitary stack. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. click Training Files. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. click Finish. for Slope. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

and click Draw Pipe.Floor level line. select the elbow fitting on the right. and click to draw the pipe. 5 Select the tee. 10 In the 3D view. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . as shown. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.Overall.PVC .Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Selection panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3 In the Section view.Sch 40 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design. and click the intersection to place the fitting. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select the vertical stack. 9 In the Type Selector. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. select Standard.DWV. click Modify.Design. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . right-click the top connector.Plumbing Plan .

select Standard. 13 Click the rotate control once. for Offset. enter 1'-0”. 18 In the plan view.Sch 40 . Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown.DWV.PVC . click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 17 In the Type Selector. 12 Select the fitting. 14 On the Options Bar. and click the rotate control to change the orientation.11 Click Modify. 15 Press Esc. under Plug .

rvt. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open.19 Click Modify. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . and verify that Level 1 .

14 In the System Browser. select Main.Overall. select Pipe Types: Water. expand Unassigned. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 6 In the left pane. under Design ➤ Plumbing . enter 9' 3''. verify that the value is 9' 0''. select Domestic Hot Water. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. double-click 3D Plumbing . 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click Check None. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. minimize the Sanitary system.) 10 Click OK. urinal. select Domestic Hot Water. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. if necessary. For Offset. for System Type. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Pipe Types: Water. and click OK. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select Plumbing Fixtures. and click Main. For Offset. 7 In the left pane.Design ➤ 3D Views. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. 9 In the left pane. and sinks. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and for System Type. select Branch. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 17 In the Filter dialog. select Branch. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. 4 In the right pane. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. draw a selection box to select the toilets. 15 In the plan view. for System Type. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select Domestic Cold Water.

24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . For Flow Conversion Method. In the System Browser. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. 19 On the System Tools panel. enter DCW 107. click Finish Editing System. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 21 On the Edit System panel. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack.

For Slope. enter 7''. at the intersection of the water main pipe. enter 4'0”. select 3/4''. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 34 In the plan view. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 36 Move the cursor to the left. select Water.2 7/8''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. for Offset. enter 3' . right-click the top DCW connector. 30 In the plan view. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. click to the left of the urinal. as shown. and click the connector. 35 In the Type Selector. and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. For Offset. for Offset. and click to place the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. enter 0”/12”. enter 10'. 31 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. 32 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. 28 In the Type Selector. select the sink above the urinal. and press Enter. under Pipe Types. 33 Click Modify.25 Using the same method. connect the second toilet. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

(Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. 41 Select the top sink.39 Move the cursor to the left. and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 40 Click Modify. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK.

and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.44 Using the same method. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. you create the hot water system. add a water heater. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

rvt. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. while pressing Ctrl. click Training Files.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing .Design is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Overall. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Plumbing Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. select the 3 sinks. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 5 In the System Browser. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 . expand the Unassigned folder. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 6 In the plan view. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser.

15 In the System Browser. and click OK. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories).) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. Default Domestic Cold Water. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 13 In the plan view. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.6 Gallon.Tankless. select 0. 12 In the Type Selector. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. and click Edit System. In later steps.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. in the Unassigned folder. When designing systems. for System Name. Default Domestic Hot Water. 10 In the System Browser. under Water Heater . verify that DCW 107 is selected. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 14 Click Modify. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. you edit the system to add equipment. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. as shown.

21 On the Placement Tools panel. 19 Select the water heater. 27 Click Modify. enter 1' 6''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. right-click the middle left connector. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. and on the Edit System panel. enter 10’. 24 Move the cursor up. and click the water main line. select the water heater. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 25 On the Options Bar. Offset: 4' 6''. as shown. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 23 On the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. click Finish Editing System.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. and press Enter. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . and select Draw Pipe. for Offset. Slope: 0''/12''. 22 In the Type Selector.

and press Enter. select Domestic Hot Water 107. and in the System Selector. select a sink. 35 On the Options Bar. and on the Placement Tools panel. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). select 4'-6''. 37 On the Options Bar. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and click Draw Pipe. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. enter 1''. click Finish Editing System.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 36 Move the cursor down. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. 33 On the Edit System panel. for Diameter. 38 Move the cursor to the right. 30 On the System Tools panel. click Edit System. enter 1' 6''. enter 9' 0''. and for Offset. for Offset. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. as shown.

as shown. enter 2' 8''. for Offset. 40 On the Options Bar.39 Move the cursor down. and click just above the bottom sink. enter 1’. and press Enter. 42 Click Modify. 41 Move the cursor down. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 .

43 In the 3D view. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

46 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 . 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. 267 . In this tutorial. 2 Right-click Standard. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. If the tutorial training files are not present. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. In this lesson. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. However.autodesk. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you can choose to save your work. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You create a new pipe type. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and click Duplicate. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. go to http://www. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. After finishing each exercise. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

6 In the Project Browser. structural beams. For Offset. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. and click Properties. However. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For System Type. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. for Material. under Mechanical. select Carbon Steel. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Offset. you create project parameters and work with schedules. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. For Pipe Type. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. select Main. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. you modify the type properties of the pipe. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. select Fire Protection Wet. or architectural components. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the next exercise. verify that 9' 0" is specified. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. For System Type. Next. click Rename.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. and then click OK. In this exercise. 9 Click OK. select Fire Protection Wet. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. In the left pane. and enter Fire Protection Wet. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. duct. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. verify that 9' 0" is selected. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Click OK twice. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select the upper half of the building. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . select Fire Protection. 6 In the drawing area. for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. the space crossing lines display. click Add. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . enter Zone 1. enter Sprinkler Zone. select Spaces. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. Under Categories. 8 Using a crossing window.rvt.Fire Protection Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Sprinkler Zone. select space Instruction 221 as shown. For Group parameter under. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. and click Element Properties. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and then click OK. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. right-click. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection.

click Training Files. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i.rvt. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Zone 1. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 13 Using the same method. enter Zone 2. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Fire Protection. to which you add various parameters. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then access instance properties. and click OK. and then click OK. including a calculated value parameter. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 In the Filter dialog. verify that only Spaces are selected.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

9 On the Formatting tab.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Click OK. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. select Maximum Spacing. for Name. and on the ribbon. For Rounding. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Obstructed-Combustible. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 10 In the Format dialog. 14 Select the new header. enter Maximum Spacing. select Fire Protection. select To the nearest 1'.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click Add Parameter. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header.Design is highlighted. select Feet and fractional inches. double-click on each column separator. enter 15. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Field Format. 7 Click OK. In the Maximum Spacing column. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. For Units. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. indicating that it’s the active view. 11 Click OK twice. For Key name. enter Light. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. For Type of Parameter. For Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. select Length. For Group parameter under. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. select Spaces. click the Formatting tab.Fire Protection Plan . 6 Using the same method. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Select Schedule keys. The schedule displays. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. and press Enter. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. For Name. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. under Available fields. Click OK. 16 Using the same method. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra. enter 130. Unobstructed Ordinary.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities.

19 Click the Formatting tab. Select Header and Blank line. select Common. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). 22 Click OK twice. For Then by. For Formula. For Units. For Type. enter Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. For Discipline. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Number. In the Fields dialog. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. Enter the formula operator / after Area. for Sorting/Grouping. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. and click Field Format. and click View Properties. for Sort by. click . Click OK. click Edit. select 0 decimal place. For Rounding. select Area. 20 On the Formatting tab. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. select Fixed. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Sprinkler Zone. and click OK. select Minimum Sprinklers.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings.

and then select Hidden field. select Hidden field. 27 In the drawing area. At the bottom of the dialog. right-click the schedule. For Fields. for Filter. select Level equals Level 2. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click View Properties. select Number. ■ In the Format dialog. and select Totals only. For Fields. select Sprinkler Zone. select Grand totals. verify that Use default settings is selected. click Edit. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. 30 Click OK twice. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 26 Click OK 3 times. Under Field formatting. for Filter by. select Minimum Sprinklers. and then click Field Format. For Then by (second instance). The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Level.

delete the word Maximum. and click View Properties. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. click Edit. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and select Totals only. Under Field formatting. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Calculate totals. select Embedded Schedule. For Category. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Fields. select Count. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. System Name. under Other. and Count. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. On the Formatting tab. select Sprinklers. for Embedded Schedule. double-click Type. for Available fields. select Grand totals.

for Protection Area Construction Type.Fire Protection Plan Design. 48 In the floor plan. 43 Click Cancel. and access the instance properties. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 50 Access the instance properties. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. select Ordinary. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. Unobstructed. Unobstructed. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Ordinary. Unobstructed. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. under Identity Data. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 46 With the space still selected. 44 In the schedule. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. As a result. under Identity Data. and the spacing parameter values are evident. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. double-click FP . use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. select space 221 Instruction.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Protection Area Construction Type. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. but their values are not determined. select Light. and click OK. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 52 Click OK. 41 In the plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 45 For Protection Area Construction Type.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

As you create the system.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. If the tutorial training files are not present. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. go to http://www. However. methodology.rvt. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. As you place the sprinklers. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. click Training Files. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. 279 . Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. you will understand the process. you can choose to save your work. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. At the end of this tutorial.autodesk. and double-click Level 2 . and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. By following the recommended workflow. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 3 In the Project Browser. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . When this happens. After placing the initial sprinkler. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail.

7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 9 In space Instruction 202. and select Sprinkler . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 11 In the drawing area. and click to place 3 sprinklers. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. select the sprinklers that you placed. 10 Press Esc twice. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.Pendent . 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down.

Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. verify that Constrain is cleared. 13 On the Options Bar.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and then press Esc. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Also. as shown. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Next. you place non-hosted sprinklers.

it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". you place non-hosted sprinklers. and click Element Properties. and 200C). 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. Next. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . enter 14' 6".Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 19 In the floor plan. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Fire Protection Plan . and press Enter. you adjust the offset. move the cursor to the right. enter 10' 6". under Constraints. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. Notice that the schedule updates.Design. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Right-click the sprinkler.FP_Ceiling view. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 29 Press Esc. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. open Design ➤ FP . 17 In the Project Browser. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. enter 11. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 Click OK. specify a vertical offset. 200B.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. For Number. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 18 Type WT. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. This number is determined in the schedule. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. for Offset.

and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. Unlike logical connections (systems).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods.Design is highlighted.Fire Protection Plan . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . In the next exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). However. 1 In the Project Browser.30 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.rvt. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. and with piping (physical connection). IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. click Training Files. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. In this exercise. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. After creating the logical connection. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.

The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. click View ➤ Systems.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 5 Right-click the header. and select Piping. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. within the Piping Systems folder. In the System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. as shown. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

13 In the System Browser. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. indicating the logical connection. In the left pane. providing system editing tools. verify that Main is selected. The Generate Layout tools are activated. and number of elements in the system. and select the system. 11 With the system still selected. for System Name. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. place the cursor over a sprinkler. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and click Select. 19 Click OK. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 15 In the drawing area. For Offset. and on the Options Bar. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select an initial piping layout. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. and a piping layout preview displays. press Tab. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. system equipment. The Edit Piping System panel displays. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. select Branch. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 12 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.Wet is selected. click Settings. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. For Pipe Type. Next. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. enter FP Wet_Zone2. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers.

22 On the Options Bar. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. enter -12' 0". these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). click Place Base. In general. select 2". click Solutions. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. as shown. When the layout is finished.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 23 For Offset. and select solution 5. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . and green represents branch lines). Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. for Diameter. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Network is selected.

click Modify. 29 Click Finish Layout. as shown. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. A (parallel movement control) displays. On the Generate Layout panel. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. 32 If necessary. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or that offset elevations are incorrect. select a different layout solution. Next. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. or manually modify the pipe. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. and various manual pipe creation tools. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. the Connect Into tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Either relocate the system components. and then you create piping to physically connect them.

click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 3 If necessary. 2 Zoom in.Design is highlighted. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. and select the elbow fitting as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . indicating that it’s the active view.

and so on) are logically connected by a system. 13 Click Finish Layout. for Solution Type. verify that Solutions is selected. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. radiators. verify that Network is selected. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 8 In the corridor. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. click Finish Editing System. 9 On the Edit System panel. click Add To System. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. and pipe or duct is created. mechanical equipment. air terminals. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. you can select the pipe or duct. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. or a system component to display system tools. and select solution 5. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 5 In the drawing area.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 14 Close the System Browser. 12 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 18 Click Finish Editing System. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system.

28 In the drawing area. 27 On the Options Bar. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. 24 In the Piping Plan. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 21 In the Piping Plan. right-click. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 23 View the result in the 3D view.20 Open Design ➤ FP . for Offset. and then press Esc. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 29 Using the same method. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select 9'. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 25 Select the sprinkler. and then tile the views. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.

Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 31 In the plan view. Because the whole system highlights. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe.

294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. ■ 6 Press Esc. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1/4" = 1'-0".Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 4 On the Options Bar. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . double-click on the section head to open the section view. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.Fire Protection Plan . for Scale.rvt.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter.21 On the Options Bar. select 4".

change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 23 Close the 3D view. and then tag the piping as shown. 26 Using the same method. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). The pipe diameter is modified. and maximize the floor plan. select 1 1/4".22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. as shown.

In this tutorial. You added tags to pipes. you created a wet fire protection system. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. For additional practice. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. In this exercise. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.

305 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. create details.

306 .

2 In the Project Browser. If the view included detail graphics. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and click Properties. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Rename. matchlines. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. dependent views. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and apply a view template. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i.rvt. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and view references. and click OK. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . under Floor Plans. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. 307 . right-click Copy of Level 1. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.

and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 10 In the drawing area. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. 4 Using the same method. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. click Training Files. more focused. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. and click Apply Default View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and then press Esc. as shown. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. views and put them on the sheet. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline.rvt. create dependent views for areas B and C. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 9 Click OK. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. to delineate splits in a large floor plan.

17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select black. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. For Line Weight. and then press Esc. Click OK. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 20 Select the upper view reference and. For Line Pattern. 13 Press Esc twice. select Double Dash 5/8"./ ---). apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. for Target view. and click OK. 19 In the drawing area. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click the current value. on the Options Bar.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. 14 Click Finish Matchline. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . In the Color dialog. select 11. 21 Using the same method.

Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Using the same method. 25 Using the same method. crop the dependent views for plans B and C.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. and zoom to each of the view references. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. as shown.

rvt. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. select Plumbing Isometric. right-click Plumbing Isometric . The section crop lines no longer display. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water.29 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . For Default View Template. and select the section box. For Sub-Discipline. for View Name. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. enter Plumbing Isometric . and click Apply Default View Template. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Plumbing. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Properties. Under Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click to select it. 4 In the Project Browser. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i.Domestic Water. Click OK.Domestic Water. select Documentation. right-click 3D Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. click Training Files. for View Classification.

The selected piping displays as a dashed line. select Dash.9 Right-click. 12 Using the same method. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. For Pattern. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". and then click OK. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select 3. Click Apply.

14 Right-click. as shown). and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click to select it. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.

16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Click in the drawing area to start a text label. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and click to select it.Domestic Water view with detailing. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. Right-click. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. In the drawing area. click Reveal Hidden Elements. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 18 Using methods learned previously. On the View Control Bar.15 Press Esc. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. press Tab 3 times. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements.Sanitary Waste. On the View Control Bar.

Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 21 Click OK twice. as shown. For Slope. and click to place the spot slope annotation. you use a plan view to create a callout view. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. Creating Callout Views | 315 . click on the Format value. In the Format dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. When the view is associated with a sheet. for Rounding. and then place the callout view on a sheet.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. select To the nearest 1/8". 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. verify that Common is selected. 25 Press Esc twice.

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. indicating that it’s the active view. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. for Scale. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown.rvt. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. 5 On the Options Bar. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1/4"=1'-0''.

HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. using the same method. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Line Weight. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Sheets (all). ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. double-click M601 . ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select 5. drag it to the sheet. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. Click OK. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 13 In the Project Browser. Creating Callout Views | 317 .8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.

for View Name. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. right-click the callout view. Click OK. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Title on Sheet. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter WSHP PART PLAN. For Default View Template. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and select the viewport.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click Apply Default View Template. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers.

28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click Apply View Template. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 26 In the Rename View dialog. enter Typical WSHP Detail. under Names. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. right-click the detail view.

duct tags. symbols.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. and annotation to create a legend. linetypes. ■ work with model-based components. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 321 .

7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.Creating Annotations In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 8 With the text still selected.rvt. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. as shown. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C.

11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. as shown.9 Press Esc twice. 15 On the Options Bar. verify that Leader is cleared. and then click Right Straight. a segment of round duct. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 16 In the drawing area. a return diffuser. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and a segment of rectangular duct. Creating Annotations | 323 . select a supply diffuser.

17 Click Modify. 22 In the Tags dialog. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. under Category. and click Open. 20 In the Tags dialog. If necessary. click Load.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. clear Leader.rfa.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Load Family dialog. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. for Ducts. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.

and then press Esc. Leader. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. as shown. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Annotations | 325 . open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 32 In the drawing area. and Attached End. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select Horizontal. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown.25 In the drawing area.

35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. select Free End. for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. as shown. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.33 On the Options Bar.

and click OK. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and lock lighting fixtures. select Dot Open 1/16". and all elements of that type are affected. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. select the last tag placed. 40 Using the method learned previously. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. lay out. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. not simply an instance property. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. That’s because you changed a type property.36 Press Esc twice. 37 In the drawing area. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. Creating Dimensions | 327 . 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. for Leader Arrowhead.

Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 12 Press Esc. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. select the dimension line. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then select the interior face of the wall. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control.

3 1/2"). Creating a Legend In this exercise. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. annotation symbols. and notes. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Legend | 329 . 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. enter 8'. and press Enter. 16 Press Esc. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 19 Using the same methods. linework. click the 3 interior locks on the line. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. and offset them 8' from the wall. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.13 Using the same method. Because the dimensions are locked. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 18 Select the dimension value (7' .

Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. select Floor Plan.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . Click OK. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click below the title to place the diffuser. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. For Scale. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i.rvt. enter Diffuser Legend.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Using the same method. click Training Files.8 Neck. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select 1/4" = 1' -0". place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . For View. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 5 Click in the drawing area.

14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.11 Press Esc. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. click next to the top diffuser. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Creating a Legend | 331 .

open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 24 Select the component’s break line. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 21 Press Esc. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Zoom in to the copied component.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 27 While pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc.DROP and its text note.RISE symbol for the copy start point. The selected detail lines are now thin. 26 Press Esc.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component.

33 Click to the left of the left break line. and then click Modify. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Creating a Legend | 333 . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 34 Using the method learned previously. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. enter E. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol.30 Select Spot Elevation . Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 35 Change the text on the right to N.MECHANICAL LEGEND.

39 With the viewport still selected. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 40 Press Esc. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

Detailing 15 In this lesson. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. indicating that it’s the active view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . and text. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A detail callout that references another view.113 East elevation view. A drafting view using detail components. click Training Files. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. detail groups. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 335 . Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail.

4 On the Options Bar. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 5 In the drawing area. and then modify and align the views.113 East on the sheet. 7 Drag the Power Riser .Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. and click to place it.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. place Power Riser . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. clear Leader. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. select each of the 2 panelboards. Next. 8 Using the same method.

9 Press Esc. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. 12 Select the Level 1 line. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. select the 113 North view. right-click. for Title on Sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and click Deactivate View. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. under Identity Data. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 13 Right-click. and click Activate View. and click OK. giving the appearance of a single view.

Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. as shown. you add wiring to the diagram. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. In the next exercise. and click Activate View. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click. 22 Press Esc. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. select the 113 East elevation view. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. right-click. 21 Using the drag control.

click New. select 6.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 9 Beginning at the transformer. and click OK. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the Line Styles dialog. for Name. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . for Line Weight. 2 Close the Project Browser.rvt. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. enter Electrical Power. notice that there are no snaps active.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 8 On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i.113 North view. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . Under Modify Subcategories. expand Lines. verify that Chain is selected. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. and then click OK. As you draw. In the New Subcategory dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles.

enter 1/8". 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 13 On the Options Bar.10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method. for Offset. as shown.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. TIP When you use the Trim tool.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. so that the result is as shown. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

29 Click Modify. 28 Click above the cap. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. as shown. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down.

34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .31 While pressing Ctrl. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. select Multiple. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 On the Options Bar.

You enter exact values for each line length. 42 On the Options Bar. enter 0 0. 39 Move the cursor to the right. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line.5. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.36 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . 40 Press Esc. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. for Offset. and then press Esc. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. and press Enter. enter 3/32".

48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. click on the length dimension value. enter Ground. 46 In the Project Browser. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. you can ensure that they stay together.125. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. while pressing Ctrl. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. 50 With the group selected. and click OK. enter 0 0. select all 3 lines. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. and press Enter. for Name.25. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Using the same method. 47 In the drawing area. Press Esc. and then press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

51 Using the method learned previously. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 54 Select the group. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 52 Select the detail group. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. TP-2B. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.

Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. click Training Files. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. In later exercises. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. and click OK. and click Rename. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and will place it on sheet E01. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 2 Right-click the copy. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. for Name.

click Home. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and then press Esc. 7 On the ViewCube. Back.6 Select the section box. and Left sides converge. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then click the corner where the Top.

12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. right-click. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Under Names. select 3D Views. Click OK. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Walkthroughs. select 3D HVAC Iso. and click Apply View Template.

click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 15 Using the same method. Typical. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 19 Complete the text labels. Move the cursor down and to the left.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Right). Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. as shown. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). and click to specify the second leader point. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 .

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select Crop Region Visible. 23 Click on the crop region. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. and then click OK. 25 Click OK. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and under Extents.To rotate and reposition a text label. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. under Extents.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Place a detail component. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. select the isometric view. click Training Files. right-click the view name. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select 3" = 1'-0". For Scale. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). 3 In the Project Browser. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. Click OK. and click Properties.29 In the drawing area.rvt. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view.

and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. click the point at the top of the drain. 13 In the drawing area. for Sub-Discipline. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Plumbing. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Click OK. 9 Zoom in to the component. as the rectangle start point. For View Classification. as shown. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. select Documentation. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 12 On the Element panel.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.

click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region.I. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. for Type. (Line). Concrete. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. and click OK. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify. select C. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. and then press Esc. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties.P. 20 Select 1. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. select the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. 18 With the filled region still selected.

36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 34 Press Esc. and then click to select them.28 Click Modify. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. 31 On the Options Bar.

43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then select the side of the slab above the line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then press Esc. 40 Click Finish Region. (Rectangle). draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. as shown. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 45 Using the method learned previously. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.

50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 52 In the Create Group dialog.. 49 Click Modify. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. as shown. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. select the Flashing Membrane group. draw wide detail lines as shown. for Name. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. enter Flashing Membrane_F. and click OK. and then click to select them.D. press Tab to highlight the chain. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.

Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 61 Using the same method. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.55 Press Esc.

71 Click Modify. as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. and use the grips to resize the masking region.62 Press Esc twice. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and then click OK. 67 On the Options Bar. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. select Leader and Free End. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 72 If necessary.

81 Select the text note. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 76 To select the leader start point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and click to specify the text insertion point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and click to specify the second leader point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 80 Press Esc twice.

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 90 Press Esc. open P103 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. select the view title. and then press Esc twice. 88 In the drawing area.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet.

click Training Files. you import a CAD detail drawing. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. For Colors. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. Click OK. select Auto-Detect. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. Click Open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. for Line Weight. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. For Layers. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. select 3.dwg. select Black and White. select Visible. For Import units. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial.rvt. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For A-----NPP. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. open P103 . and then press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. select the viewport title. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 11 Press Esc. 15 Close the file with or without saving it.8 Type ZF.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 12 In the drawing area.

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful